‫ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﻬﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﺸﯽ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﮐﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪Optical Ground ) OPGW‬‬
‫‪ ( Wire‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﺸﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ‬

‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﻳﮏ ) ‪ core‬ﻳﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ (ﮐﻪ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺷﮑﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ) ‪ clad‬ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ( ﻋﺎﻳﻖ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺷﮑﺴﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﭼﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺷﮑﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺯﻣﺎﻳﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﻢ ) ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ( ‪ ،‬ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ) ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ( ﻭ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻧﻮﺭﺍﻧﯽ ﺷﮑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ﺍﻧﮑﺴﺎﺭ (‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺷﮑﺴﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺷﮑﺴﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺷﮑﺴﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻏﻠﻴﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﺗﺎﺑﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ )ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ (‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻌﮑﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻐﺰی ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﻓﻴﺒﺮﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺷﮑﺴﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫‪ : Step Index‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺷﮑﺴﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻳﮑﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﺎﻻی ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ی ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺷﮑﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺮﺍﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺻﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻌﮑﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺷﮑﺴﺖ ﺑﺤﺮﺍﻧﯽ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮک ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺎﺑﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻣﻨﻌﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ : Granded Index‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﻳﻪ ﻭ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺷﮑﺴﺘﻬﺎی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﺒﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﯽ ﻣﻨﻌﮑﺲ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭘﺮﺗﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﺘﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ‬
‫ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻴﺒﺮﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﻪ ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﺍﻧﺘﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﻪ ‪ 24‬ﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ‪ 6‬ﺗﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫*‪ : Server‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫*‪ : Client‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫*‪ : Hub‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‬
‫*‪ : Splice‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫*ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﻮﺯﻩ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ‪ MAN‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺷﻬﺮی )‪(Metropolitan Area Network‬‬
‫ﺏ( ‪ LAN‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ )‪(Local Area Network‬‬
‫ﺝ( ‪ WAN‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ )‪(Wide Area Network‬‬
‫ﺩ( ‪ Internet‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ )‪(International Network‬‬

‫* ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺩﻭ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪- ۱‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﻤﺠﻮﺷﯽ )‪ (Fusion‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ )‬
‫‪(Fusion Splicer‬‬
‫‪- ۲‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﯽ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ) ‪(Fiber Lock‬‬
‫*‪ : Splice Closure‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺮﺏ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﯽ ﻣﺼﻮﻥ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ : Plug & Play‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ : ( Optical Time Domain Reflect Meters ) OTDR‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻭ ﺳﻨﺠﺶ ﺍﺗﻼﻑ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ODF‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی‬

‫‪DDF‬‬ ‫‪Coaxial‬‬
‫‪MDF‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﺝ ﺳﻴﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪: OTDR‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ " ﺍﻟﻒ" ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﻼﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ )ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ‪ (1‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ) ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ‪ (2‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ " ﺏ" ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ) ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ‪ (1‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﻼﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ) ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ‪ ( 2‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮐﺎﻧﮑﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

‫‪Pach Core‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﮐﺎﻧﮑﺘﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮ ﮐﺎﻧﮑﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﮕﺪﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Attenator‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﮐﺎﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﻟﻴﺰﺭ )ﻧﻮﺭ( ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻃﻴﻒ ﺟﺬﺑﯽ ﻓﻴﺒﺮﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺭی‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻃﻴﻒ ﺟﺬﺑﯽ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﺒﺮﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺝ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﺎﺡﻳﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻓﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻘﻳﻪ ی ﻣﻨﺤﻨﯽ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬پﻩﻧﺎی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﻃﻮﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ کﻩ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﺪﻭﻝﻩ ﺵﺩﻩ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﮔﻔﺖﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -1‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ : 850 nm‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﻞ ﺳﻴﺴﺖﻣﻬﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬

‫ﻧﺎﺡﻳﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺥﺗﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺡﻳﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﻭﻡ ‪ : 1310nm‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺡﻳﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻝ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺡﻳﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

‫ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺵﺗﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﺷﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ : 1550 nm‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﮐﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﻬﻦﺍی‬
‫ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺰﺭگ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ پﻫﻦﺍی ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎی ‪ WDM‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺡﻳﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺥﺗﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ کﻩ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺖﻣﻬﺎی ‪ WDM‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻂﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻴﻖ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺏﻩ پﻩﻧﺎی ﺑﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮی ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺏﻩ ﺱﻩ ﻧﺎﺣﯽﻩ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﺴﯽﻡ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﯽ ﻣﻂﺍﺏﻕ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻫﺎی ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ L‬ﻭ ‪ C‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻫﺮﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻥﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫‪C-Band 1530nm-1565nm‬‬
‫‪L- Band 1565nm-1620nm‬‬
‫‪S- Band 1485nm-1525nm‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﻮﺭی‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﺏﻩ‬
‫ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮏ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﺗﻮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﺗﻮ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺳﻤﺖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮏ ﺏﻩ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ‪ :ELECTRICAL/OPTICAL‬ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﺑﻪ‬

‫ﺍﭘﺘﻴﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﮏ ‪ LED‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﺸﻌﺸﻊ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺒﺪﻝ کﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺩ ﻟﻴﺰﺭی یﺍ ‪ (LASER DIODE ) LD‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺪﻝﻫﺎی ‪ : OPTICAL/ELECTRICAL‬ﺩﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭی ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ‪ (Avalanche photo diode ) APD‬ﻭ ‪(Positive ) PIN Diode‬‬
‫‪ Intrinsic Negative‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫‪Transmission‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫‪Access‬‬ ‫‪ ‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ Access‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ 2M‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ Active‬ﻓﻴﺒﺮﻧﻮﺭی ‪ SDH‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ " ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮏ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ی ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ " Repeater‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ SDH‬ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ‪) Synchronous Digital Hierarchy‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ( ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬ﮐﻪ ﺗﮑﻨﻴﮑﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﺮﺍﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍی ﻭﺳﻴﻊ ‪ WAN‬ﻭ ‪ MAN‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ SDH .‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ‪Time ) TDM‬‬
‫‪ (Devision Multipelexing‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ ‪ SONET‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ ‪ PDH ، SDH‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﻧﻮﺭی‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ )‪ Synchrounous Optical Network (SONET‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻧﺴﺘﻴﺘﻮ ﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺮﻳﮑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ‪ SONET‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫‪ CCITT‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 1988‬ﻣﻴﻼﺩی ﺑﻪ ‪ SDH‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : PDH‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﺮ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺐ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫" ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ" ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻠﮑﺴﻴﻨﮓ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭽﻴﻨﮓ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ‪ PDH‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪ SDH‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﮐﻤﺘﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻴﮑﻪ ‪ PDH‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻠﮑﺴﻴﻨﮓ ﻏﻴﺮﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )‪ (Add – Drop‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻴﮑﻪ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎی ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻁﯽ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻠﮑﺴﻴﻨﮓ ﻭ ﺩی ﻣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻠﮑﺴﻴﻨﮓ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻁﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺨﺮﻳﺐ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺩﻟﻴﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﭼﺮﺍ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ PDH‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ‪ SDH‬ﻧﺮﺥ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻀﺮﺑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﺥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺑﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻠﮑﺲ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ )‪ (TDM‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﻦ ‪ SDH‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺮﺍﻓﻴﮏ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎی ‪، ATM ، PDH‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﺗﺮﻧﺖ ﻭ‪ ...‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ SDH‬ﻧﮕﺎﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪F0‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫˺ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺴﺐ ﺍﻁﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ PDH‬ﻭ ‪ SDH‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ‪ SDH‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

‫‪64‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺑﺎﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺗﯽ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ STM-N‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ )ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﺘﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ‬ ‫‪Kb/sec‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ 8000*8 = 64 Kb/s ).‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ‬ ‫‪64 Kb/s‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ‪( STM-N‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‬

‫ﻫﺮ ‪ E1‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻭ ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺑﺎﻧﺪی ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 2 Mb/sec‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻫﺮ ‪ 2 Mb/s‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﯽ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ‪ Time Slot‬ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭ ‪ Time slot‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ‪ Orderwire :‬ﻭ ‪ NMS‬ﻭ‪ ...‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ‪ Time Slot‬ﺷﺎﻧﺰﺩﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻁﺮﻳﻖ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ Time Slot‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻨﮑﺮﻭﻧﻴﺰﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮐﻼک ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪ Time Slot‬ﺳﯽ ﻭ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪E1 = 2 Mb/s‬‬

‫‪32 × 64 Kb/s‬‬ ‫‪= 2 M b/sec‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

‫‪Time slot‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ STM-1‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ SDH‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ 63‬ﺗﺎ ‪E1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﻞ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﯽ ‪ STM-1‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ‪ 155 Mb/sec‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪STM-1 = 63 E1 = 126 Mb/sec‬‬

‫‪ 1890‬ﺧﻂ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬ ‫‪ STM-1‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪32 × 64 Kb/s‬‬ ‫‪30 × 64 Kb/sec =1890 Kb/sec‬‬

‫‪ 4‬ﻧﺮﺥ‬ ‫‪ SDH‬ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻧﺮﺥ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ‪ 155 Mb/s‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬ﮐﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ SDH‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪).‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ STM-4‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ STM-1‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪.‬‬

‫‪64 Kb/s‬‬ ‫)‪E1 (2Mb/s‬‬ ‫‪STM-1‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﻧﻞ‬

‫‪STM-4‬‬ ‫‪STM-16‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ‪ STM-N‬ﺩﺭ ‪ SDH‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ 9‬ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭ ‪ 270*N‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﯽ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻪ ‪ N‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ‪ 256 ، 64 ،16 ، 4 ، 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ‪ SDH‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﯽ ‪ N‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ STM-N‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ N‬ﺗﺎ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ STM-1‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻠﮑﺲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪ STM-1‬ﺑﻪ ‪ E1‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

‫ﻳﮏ ﺭﺷﺘﻪ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ‪ 24 Core‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ 12‬ﺟﻔﺖ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪ STM‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻔﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ( Linear‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻄﯽ )‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺣﻠﻘﻮی ) ‪ . ( Ring‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺣﻠﻘﻮی ﺑﺮ ﺧﻄﯽ ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﺎ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﻄﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻞ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍک ‪: DDF‬‬

‫‪ : OCDF‬ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﻟﺨﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﻴﻮژﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺟﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭘﻴﮑﺪﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : ODF‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﮐﺮﻭﺯ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺁﻥ ‪ ODF‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ OCDF‬ﭘﻴﮑﺪﻝ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ DDF‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : DDF‬ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ‪ E1‬ﻫﺎی ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ in put‬ﻭ ‪ out put‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺳﺖ ‪ :‬ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪OCDF‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی‬

‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ‪ SDH‬ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ‪ STM‬ﺩﻭ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍک ‪) SDH‬ﺟﺰء ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ Active‬ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ( ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫‪: NEC‬‬
‫) ‪)( 25 slot‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﺷﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺷﻠﻒ ‪ SDH‬ﺩﺭ ‪( NEC‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ‪ : CLK‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬

‫ﻭ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ Master‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ‪ Slave‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 21‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪ E1 ،‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ‪ : 2 M‬ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ 4‬ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ، E1‬ﺳﻪ ﺗﺎی ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻭ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭﺗﮑﺸﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ‪ : (Time Slot Interface)TSI‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﻦ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻳﮑﯽ ‪ Master‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ Protection‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ 2M‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ : (System Control)SC‬ﮐﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﮑﺴﺮی ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ Remot‬ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2M‬ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺁﻻﺭﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ : AGENT‬ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ‬

‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Load‬ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ‬
‫‪ CPU‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ‪ : STM-1‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ 2‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ In put‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ Out put‬ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻣﺎژﻭﻟﻬﺎی ﻧﻮﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪: ( PDH ) Access‬‬

‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ 2M‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Loop‬ﻭ ‪ Bayly‬ﻭ‪ ...‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻠﻒ ‪) : LOOP‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪LOOP‬‬

‫‪Active‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻮﺭی ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩ ﭘﺲ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ‪ Passive‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻠﻒ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫* ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ‪ E&M‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺸﺖ ﻋﺪﺩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﮏ ‪ DATA‬ﻳﺎ ‪ DTS‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ‪ E1‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ‬
‫‪ Tx‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ‪ Rx‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ‪ 2M‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪ E1‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ Protection‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ FXO‬ﻭ ‪ FXS‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫* ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻠﻒ ﺩﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫‪FXO‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ FXS‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Cross‬ﺯﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪: Loop‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ‪ MAP‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪(Tab‬‬ ‫‪) Log On‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﺯﺩﻥ(‬ ‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬

‫‪Target‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﯽ ‪12‬‬ ‫‪Slot‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ‪ Tx‬ﻭ‪ Rx‬ﺭﻭی ﺍﺳﻼﺕ ‪ 1‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 2‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪Port‬‬ ‫‪Port‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 32‬ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪T.S‬‬

‫‪Source‬‬

‫ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﯽ ‪12‬‬ ‫‪slot Slot‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ port‬ﻫﺎی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ FXO‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ 12‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ port‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Port‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ 32‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﺳﻼﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﻢ‬ ‫‪T.S‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮی ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪T.S.#‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ yes‬ﻭ ‪ no‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎک ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Clear‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻳﺎ ‪ Data‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ Voice‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪d/v‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ T.S ،‬ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪T.S‬ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ Target‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ Clear‬ﺭﺍ ‪ Yes‬ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻠﺶ ﭘﺎﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ‪T.S‬ﻫﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ً ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ‪ Desable‬ﻭ ‪Enable‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ‪ MAP‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ )ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ D‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ‪ Select a new TSI map‬ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ESC‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ y‬ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺳﺪ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻫﺴﺘﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ 5‬ﺑﻪ ‪ 12‬ﺗﺎ‬ ‫‪ FXS‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﺕ‬ ‫) ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ 12‬ﺗﺎ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ E1‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻭﻝ (‬

‫ﺑﻪ ‪ Slot 5‬ﻭ ‪ Port 1‬ﻭ ‪TS 1‬‬ ‫‪ Port 1‬ﻭ ‪ Slot 1‬ﻭ ‪TS 1‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺟﻬﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ‪ Slot 5‬ﻭ ‪ Port 2‬ﻭ ‪TS 2‬‬ ‫‪ Port 1‬ﻭ ‪ Slot 1‬ﻭ ‪TS 2‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺟﻬﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ‪ Slot 5‬ﻭ ‪ Port 3‬ﻭ ‪TS 3‬‬ ‫‪ Port 1‬ﻭ ‪ Slot 1‬ﻭ ‪TS 3‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺟﻬﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﻂ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ‪ 12‬ﺗﺎ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ FXO‬ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪ 12‬ﺗﺎ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ FXO‬ﺩﻭﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﻼﺕ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ‪ Slot 6‬ﻭ ‪ Port 1‬ﻭ ‪TS 1‬‬ ‫‪ Port 1‬ﻭ ‪ Slot 1‬ﻭ ‪TS 13‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺟﻬﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ‪ Slot 6‬ﻭ ‪ Port 2‬ﻭ ‪TS 2‬‬ ‫‪ Port 1‬ﻭ ‪ Slot 1‬ﻭ ‪TS 14‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺟﻬﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ‪ Slot 6‬ﻭ ‪ Port 3‬ﻭ ‪TS 3‬‬ ‫‪ Port 1‬ﻭ ‪ Slot 1‬ﻭ ‪TS 15‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺟﻬﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪ 12‬ﺗﺎ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ FXO‬ﺩﻭﻣﯽ ﻧﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ MAP‬ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Desable‬ﻭ ‪ Enable‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪Save‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ) ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Log on‬ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ( ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ V‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ‪ Store / Retrieve Configuration‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Store‬ﻭ ‪ Retrieve‬ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺯﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺳﺪ ‪ yes‬ﻳﺎ ‪ no‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ yes‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺴﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺴﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ‪ Loop‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ً ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺯﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ S‬ﻭ ﺯﺩﻥ ‪System‬‬
‫‪ Set up‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ‪ Inistial Card‬ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ Slot‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ inistal‬ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫* ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ‪ (IA E1/T1 ) Optic‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ Loop‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﺯ ‪ E1‬ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ Level‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪: Loop‬‬
‫‪ U‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪Choose a slot‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ) ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ Slot‬ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪Tab‬‬
‫‪O‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪ Slot‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ‪Log‬‬
‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪ on‬ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪System setup‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ Level‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ +7‬ﺗﺎ ‪ -10‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﻖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ‪Level‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Level‬ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ ) .‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ‪ TX‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪(.‬‬

‫‪: Bayly‬‬
‫* ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﯽ‪ Slot‬ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ PDH‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی ﺷﻠﻒ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ‬

‫‪ (BAYLY‬ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫‪ 2M‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ 12‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ Slot‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ A1‬ﻭ ‪ A3‬ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪E1‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ A10‬ﻭ ‪ A11‬ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ‪ Power‬ﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

‫* ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ : DCM64N‬ﺿﺮﻳﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ ‪ 64K‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ : DCM64‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 64K‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ‪ DATA‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫* ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ : ( Low Speed Digital… ) LSDCM‬ﮐﻪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ RTU‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ DC/DC‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (E1 Chanel Bank) E1 CB‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ E1‬ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ‪ Access‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻠﻒ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ‪Bayly‬ﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ Local‬ﺁﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﯽ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ‬
‫‪E & M _ 4 Wire‬‬ ‫‪: Analog‬‬ ‫‪(۱‬‬
‫‪LSDCM‬‬ ‫‪: Digital‬‬ ‫‪(۲‬‬
‫‪64 N : DCM‬‬ ‫‪: Digital‬‬ ‫‪(۳‬‬
‫‪64 DCM‬‬ ‫‪: Digital‬‬ ‫‪(۴‬‬

‫*‪LSDCM : Low Speed Digital….‬‬

‫*ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺣﺰﻭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﯽ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ :‬ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺛﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺛﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﮑﺪﻳﮕﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ Loop‬ﻭ ‪ SDH‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ Loop‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻠﮑﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪E1‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﻧﻮﺭی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪SDH‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺿﺎ ‪ STM-1‬ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ 64‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ E1‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ 24 Core ، 12 Core‬ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻮﻧﺖ ﺑﺎﮐﺲ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺴﺖ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﻴﻮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﻓﻠﺰی ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﺎﮐﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﻮﻧﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ‬
‫ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﮑﯽ ﮐﻠﻔﺖ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻓﺮﻫﺎی ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Core‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻓﺮ ‪ 6‬ﺗﺎﺭ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪.‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﻓﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﮐﺎﺳﺖ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻟﺨﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ OCDF‬ﭘﻴﮕﺪﻝ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺟﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ‪ OCDF‬ﭘﻴﮕﺪﻝ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﭘﺴﺖ‬
‫‪ STM‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ SDH‬ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ STM-4 ، STM-1‬ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪Tx‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﻭ ﻳﮑﯽ ‪ Rx‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ‪STM‬ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ‪ 2M‬ﮐﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪E1‬ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ‪ STM1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی‬
‫‪ 2M‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪ 63‬ﺗﺎ ‪ E1‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ‪21‬‬
‫‪ 2Mb/s‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ (.‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪ 21‬ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ E1‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ )ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﮑﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ 2M‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ SDH‬ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﻧﮑﺘﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪ 7‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ Tx‬ﻭ ‪ Rx‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ‪ Tx‬ﻭ ‪ Rx‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ DDF‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ‪ DDF‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ Access‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ‪ 64K‬ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ‪ 2M‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ 64K‬ﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ )‬
‫‪ E&M , DATA , VOICE , ETERNET‬ﻭ ‪ (...‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ‪ MDF‬ﻣﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻟﻬﺎی ﮐﺮﻭﺯ ﻗﻴﭽﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﻠﻒ ‪ Bayly‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ Factory Reset‬ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪).‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Reset‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ Factory Reset‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Reset‬ﺑﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﮐﻞ ﺷﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ( ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ‪ User Name‬ﻭ ‪ Password‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ‪ User Name‬ﺁﻥ "ﺻﻔﺮ" ﻭ ‪ Password‬ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ "‪ "Bayly‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﯽ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻠﻒ ﻣﯽ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Reset‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪ Bayly‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ E-1‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ‪:‬‬

‫‪ e1 Enter‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪Logon‬‬

‫‪3) Maintenance Functionc Enter‬‬
‫‪9) Diagnostics Enter‬‬
‫‪6) Reboot E1 IM п‬‬

‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ E1‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻼک ﺩﺭ ﺷﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪ Internal‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻠﻒ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ Looptimed‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ‬ ‫‪)External‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﮐﻼک ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ( ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺧﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Recoverd‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی‪:‬‬

‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ‪، Data‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪ ( Local Craft Terminal ) LCT‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ LCT .‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﭘﺮﻭﺳﺴﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﯽ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ‪ ) Maintenance ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻭ ﻧﮕﺪﺍﺭی ( ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ LCT‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎ ‪ log‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬

‫ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ) ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ( ﻳﮏ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ) ‪ ( Loop‬ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ LCT‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬

‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ ‪ Maintenance‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪: LCT‬‬

‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ‪ setup‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪, disk 1 600v , disk 2 basic , disk 1 basic .‬‬
‫‪ disk 2 2500c , disk 1 2500c , disk 2 600v‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺎ ‪ 2500c‬ﻭ ‪ 600v‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫‪ RUN‬ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪: LCT‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ Com1‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ LCT‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ) ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ( ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ NEC‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ‪ RUN‬ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪USER : V2SUPER‬‬
‫‪PASSWORD : SPR-V2‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﮑﯽ‬

‫‪*GUI : Grafical Unit Interface‬‬
‫)‪ LCT‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ GUI‬ﺍﺳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪Operation_System‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ Initialization‬ﺩﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ Hot‬ﻭ ‪ Cold‬ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ LCT‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Operation‬ﻭ ‪ Administration‬ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪Initialize‬‬ ‫‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ Provisioning‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی‬ ‫‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪: loop back‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪Maintenance‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی‬ ‫‪.۳‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‪ loop‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ‬

‫‪ : switching operation‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬

‫ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫* ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Bayly‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫*ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ‪ Cross‬ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ -‬ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ NMS‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ).‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ‪ LCT‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ (‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪: NMS‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮی ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻂ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ NMS‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻋﯽ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻧﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪).‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ‪ LCT‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ (‬

‫‪ Configuration _1‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬

‫‪ Alarm‬ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬ ‫‪ _2‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ‬ ‫‪NMS‬‬

‫ﺩﻭﺭ‬

‫‪ _3‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ‪ Alarm‬ﻫﺎی ﻫﻤﻪ ﻧﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Critical .۱‬‬
‫‪Major .۲‬‬
‫‪Minor .۳‬‬
‫‪Warning .۴‬‬
‫‪Not Alarm .۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ‪ 5‬ﮐﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪Operation_Alarm Acknowledge_Ok‬‬

‫‪ Root‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ی‬

‫ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ) ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ( ‪:‬‬

‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪Detail setup‬‬ ‫‪Operation_Remote Access‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ Current Alarm‬ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﺎ ‪ LCT‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

‫‪* NE : Network Elements‬‬
‫) ‪ Inventory‬ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ‪ shelf‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﮐﻞ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ shelf‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ‪ Core /1 :‬ﻭ ‪Extenation /2‬؛ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺝ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Core‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻫﺎ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ : Severity .۱‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺁﻻﺭﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ Critical , Major Minor , Not alarm‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ : Event Date / Time .۲‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫‪ ) NE : Object Type .۳‬ﻧﻮﺩ ( ﻭ ‪ ) Path‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ (‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫‪ : Area .۴‬ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪ Root‬ﺭﻭی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ _ ‪Pair-TREC‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫‪ : Domain .۵‬ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ‪ STM‬ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ‪VR3 , R1 , :‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫‪VR2 , VR1‬‬
‫‪ : Office .۶‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ‪ NE‬ﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫‪ : NE .۷‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫‪ : Object .۸‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ‪ Obtion‬ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ Sms_600v (I :‬ﻭ ‪Sms_2500v (II‬‬

‫‪ ) : Package / AID .۹‬ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ‪ _ ( SDH‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ TU12_1_W_4_1 :‬ﮐﻪ ‪W‬‬‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ‪ 4 _ West‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ STM-4‬ﻭ ‪ 1‬ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ‪ STM‬ﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ‪ STM-4‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪: Event Detail‬‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪.۱۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺟﺰﺋﯽ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Section / Path / HK‬‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪.۱۱‬‬
‫‪ : Name‬ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪:‬‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪Alarm‬‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪Type‬‬ ‫‪.۱۲‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Communication (I‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪) AIS ، ( Los Of Signal) LOF :‬‬
‫‪ PSF ، ( Signal Degree ) SD ، ( Alarm Indication Signal‬ﻭ ‪ ...‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Equipment Alarm (2‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪Unit Access Fail ، Verify Match‬‬
‫‪ : Environment Alarm (3‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪HKA‬‬
‫‪..............‬‬

‫* ‪ LOS‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ‪ STM-16‬ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﯽ ‪ AIS‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Communication Alarm‬ﻭ‬ ‫* ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ‪ Major‬ﺍی ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ Association Failed‬ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ SDH‬ﺭﺍ ‪ Reset‬ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ) ‪ RST‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪( SC‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺑﺮﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﮏ ‪ Shelf‬ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﯽ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ Critical‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻨﻔﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ‪ Critical‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪NE‬‬
‫ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪).‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪ Shelf‬ﻭ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ (‬
‫‪Los Of Signal‬‬ ‫* ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺭی ﺷﻤﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ STM-16‬ﺁﻥ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ Current Alarm‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﻴﭻ‬
‫ﺁﻻﺭﻣﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ Modify‬ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫‪houskeeping‬‬ ‫‪Configuration‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ‬

‫‪) VR – 2‬ﮐﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 2‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫‪Pair TRGC‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ (.‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬

‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Normaly Close‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ Normaly Open‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ Modify‬ﺭﺥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﻳﺎ ‪ Loop‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ Open‬ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Loop‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ )ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ‪ Open‬ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪(.‬‬

‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Backup‬‬

‫‪Server Control Menu‬‬ ‫‪System‬‬ ‫‪Misc‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪Root‬‬

‫‪Pair_TREC‬‬

‫‪Run ,Stop‬‬ ‫‪Svr- ao‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫‪server‬‬ ‫‪Device list‬‬ ‫‪DBB Backup‬‬

‫‪client‬‬

‫‪ Dat‬ﻣﯽ‬ ‫‪ Server‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ‪ Client‬ﺑﮏ ﺁپ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﮏ ﺁپ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ Server‬ﺑﮏ ﺁپ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ‪Client‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪CM Data base‬‬

‫‪FM Data base‬‬ ‫‪Data of Backup exectud‬‬ ‫‪Client‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫‪PM Data base‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ‪ DBR Resture‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪ Resture‬ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Cross Connnect‬‬
‫‪U‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Root‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Path Ap‬‬

‫‪ User Path Search -‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬

‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﻪ ‪ Type‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Active status‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ).....‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ، Point To Point‬ﻭ ‪ Active Status‬ﺁﻥ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ‪ Active‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Search‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫*** ﺑﺮﺍی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ‪ Search‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ File‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Export list‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ CROSS‬ﺯﺩﻥ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Root‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Path AP‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬

‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪Path‬‬ ‫‪Creat User‬‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Name‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Auto Naming‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻴﮏ ﺩﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻳﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Level‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ‪ VC-12‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫‪ Package atype‬ﻧﻮﻉ )‪ SDH (2M‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ Type‬ﻧﻴﺰ ‪ Point To Point‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Directionality‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎی ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ‪ 2 Way‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪ 1Way‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ‪ send‬ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ Count‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ E1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫"‪ "1‬ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ E1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ A Term‬ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ )ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ‪ Drag‬ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪Root‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ‪ A Term‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ(‪ .‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ Z Term‬ﭘﺴﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ‪ Drag‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Select‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎی‬
‫‪ E1‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﺍ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ‪ E1‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 21‬ﺗﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺷﻠﻒ ‪SDH‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﻭ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ‪ E1‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺌﻨﻴﺖ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺍﺳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﭘﺮﻭﺗﮑﺸﻦ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Sncp‬‬
‫‪ Data‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺯﺩﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ‪ OK‬ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺮﺗﮑﺸﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Auto mating routing‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ‪E1‬ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﺪ ﻭﻟﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪Routing on single‬‬
‫‪ Window‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺳﭙﺎﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪Root‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺧﻂ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ Set rout‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﭘﺮﻭﺗﮑﺸﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺮﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻭﭘﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﭘﺮﻭﺗﮑﺸﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻢ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻃﻮﺳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪Set rout‬‬
‫ﻃﻮﺳﯽ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺭﻭی ‪ Time Slot‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪User‬‬
‫‪ path TS‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ E1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ E1‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪Sncp‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎی ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪Time Slot‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﯽ ‪Register‬ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Time Slot‬‬ ‫‪User Path TS / - / Register‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ‪ Errore‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺮﺍﺱ‬
‫ﭘﺎک ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ User Path List‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫‪Active Status‬‬ ‫‪Search‬‬
‫‪Operation‬‬ ‫‪Delit Path‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪OK‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Path Configuration‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Root‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ User path list‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Search‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﮐﺮﺍﺱ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻟﻮپ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ‪ MDF‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪Detail‬‬ ‫‪Setup‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻧﻮﺩ‬
‫‪Parametr Provision‬‬ ‫‪Modification‬‬

‫‪Ok‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪Facilities‬‬

‫‪Send‬‬ ‫‪Unlocked‬‬

‫ﻟﻮپ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ E1‬ﺩﺭ ‪: SDH‬‬

‫‪ Loop‬ﺯﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ Operation‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ E1‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺼﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Detail Setup‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ Maintenance‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Loop back‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪2M‬ﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Operation‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫‪ OK‬ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ E1‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ‪ Loopback Enable‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Desable‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Enable‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Loopback Operation‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ‪ E1‬ﺭﺍ ﻟﻮپ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻟﻮپ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪ SDH‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ‪ Facility Loop‬ﻭ ‪. Terminal Loop‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﭘﺴﺖ ‪ A,B‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺴﺖ ‪ A‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Facility Loop‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﺴﺖ ‪ A‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻮپ‬
‫ﺯﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺴﺖ ‪A‬‬
‫ﭼﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺴﺖ ‪ A‬ﮐﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻳﻢ ‪ Terminal Loop‬ﺑﺰﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﮐﻞ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭘﺴﺖ ‪ B‬ﻟﻮپ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺴﺖ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺴﺖ ‪ A‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻟﻮپ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ‪ Send‬ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﻟﻮپ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ Loop‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪Loopback Operation‬‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ Release LPBK‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ‪ Send‬ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻧﻪ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Inventory‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪Event log‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪Alarm Status‬‬ ‫‪‬‬
‫‪Report‬‬ ‫‪‬‬

‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪: Inventory‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪Inventory‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻤﻪ ﻧﻮﺩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪File out‬‬

‫‪Close‬‬ ‫‪Replace‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺴﺖ‬ ‫‪I.88.1.20‬‬

‫‪Copy to Drive D_Daily_Inventory_..........‬‬ ‫‪Drive C‬‬

‫* ‪ Inventory‬ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺍی ﺍﺯ ‪ Shelf‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪: Event log‬‬

‫‪Filter‬‬ ‫‪Event log‬‬ ‫‪Fault‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪Root‬‬
‫‪Search‬‬ ‫‪Set‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺭﻭﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 Save ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﻭﺯ‬

Report_Daily_Event log_............. Drive D

: Alarm Status
Alarm Status Fault Root ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

Save ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﻭﺯ‬

Drive D_Report_Daily_Alarm Status_............

: ‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ‬ U

Shortcut to Report TREC & Floppy Drive

Inventory : Copy to Shortcut_Daily_Inventory_.... & Desktop

Event log
A ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬ Data Text to columns
& : Shortcut_Daily
Alarm status

Delimited Next Comma Next Finish

N ‫ ﺗﺎ‬A ‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬ ‫ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﭼﭗ‬2 ‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬

Format Cell Alignment Horizental : Center Border

Vertical : Center

Inside & Outside Ok 1 ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ‬ High light

Save as : Excel 97_ ...................

: Sample ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
................ ‫ ﻭ‬Report ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬

: Sample ‫ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬PDF

File Print Jaws PDF Creator Save in :

….._Report_PDF

‫ ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬-‫ ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‬: ‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ‬

، Sample ، Event log ، Inventory ، Alarm status ‫ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی‬
Desktop ‫ ﺭﻭی‬PDF

: ‫ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ‬Mail

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ Add to Archive Internet Favorites

Gmail User name : mncfiber To mnc Attach Send

Password : optic1386 subject: ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬

: ‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻫﻔﺘﮕﯽ‬
Long Term ‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ‬ U

Long Term Performance ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬

Save Search PM Data View PM Information

‫ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‬Setup ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬Long Term ، ‫ ﻫﺎ‬PM ‫* ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ‬

:

Long Term Performance ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬

‫ ﺑﺮﺍی‬End Time ‫ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭ‬Start Time ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ Add Setup
30 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬24 : ‫ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻌﺪ ) ﻳﮏ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ( _ﻣﺜﻼ‬6

‫ ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬-‫ ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‬: ‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ‬

 ‫ﺍﻃﻼ ﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻫﺎی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ ‪:‬‬
‫‪Access‬‬
‫‪D&V‬‬ ‫‪Voice‬‬ ‫‪Data‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻗﻭﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ‪1‬‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ‪2‬‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﭘﺭﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪TAOC‬‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﭘﺭﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪SCC‬‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺷﻭﺵ‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻓﺭﻭﺩﮔﺎﻩ‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺩﺍﻣﻐﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﻭﻥ ‪IMS‬‬
‫*‬ ‫ﺟﻼﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻳﻔﻳﺕ‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻫﻭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﻭﻥ ‪IMS‬‬
‫ﮐﻳﻔﻳﺕ‬ ‫*‬ ‫**‬ ‫ﻧﻳﺭﻭﮔﺎﻩ ﺩﻣﺎﻭﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪SCC‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﻭﻥ ‪IMS‬‬
‫*‬ ‫ﭘﺳﺕ ﺩﻣﺎﻭﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪SCC‬‬
‫ﮐﻳﻔﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﻭﻥ ‪IMS‬‬
‫*‬ ‫ﭘﺳﺕ ﺩﻣﺎﻭﻧﺩ ﺑﻪ ‪TAOC‬‬
‫ﮐﻳﻔﻳﺕ‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺎﺩﺕ ﺁﺑﺎﺩ‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻧﻳﺯﺍﺭ‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺁﻫﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻭﺭﺍﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻣﺷﻳﺭﻳﻪ‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﮔﺭﻣﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺳﻣﻧﺎﻥ‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺭی ﺷﻣﺎﻟﯽ‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺭی ﺷﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﻥ ﺗﭘﻪ ‪PBX-1‬‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺭی ﺷﻣﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﻥ ﺗﭘﻪ ‪PBX-2‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﻭﻥ ‪IMS‬‬
‫*‬ ‫‪ PBX-1‬ﺟﻼﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪TAOC‬‬
‫ﮐﻳﻔﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺁﺯﻣﻭﻥ ‪IMS‬‬
‫ﮐﻳﻔﻳﺕ‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪ PBX-2‬ﺟﻼﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪TAOC‬‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺳﻌﻳﺩ ﺁﺑﺎﺩ‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻌﺎﺩﺕ ﺁﺑﺎﺩ‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻗﻡ ‪ 1‬ﺑﻪ ﻗﻡ ‪2‬‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺁﺯﺍﺩﮔﺎﻥ‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻓﻳﺭﻭﺯﮐﻭﻩ‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻼﻣﺷﻬﺭ‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪ PBX-1‬ﺭﻭﺩﺷﻭﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪TAOC‬‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫‪ PBX-2‬ﺭﻭﺩﺷﻭﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪TAOC‬‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻧﻳﺭﻭﮔﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺩﺷﻭﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪TAOC‬‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﻧﻳﺭﻭﮔﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺩﺷﻭﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪SCC‬‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﭘﺳﺕ ﺭﻭﺩﺷﻭﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪SCC‬‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﭘﺳﺕ ﺭﻭﺩﺷﻭﺭ ﺑﻪ ‪TAOC‬‬
‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬ ‫ﭘﺳﺕ ﻣﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ‪TAOC‬‬

‫‪DTS : Dispaching Telephon System‬‬

‫)ﺻﺤﺒﺖ(‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺟﺎﻫﺎ ‪ Hot line‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ‪.‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪DTS : Direct Telephon Set‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭﻟﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺧﻂ ﻣﯽ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫) ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ‪( Tx‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺍی ﭘﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪ Order wire‬ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬

‫ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻫﻤﮑﺎﺭﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ‪ NMS‬ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻟﭗ ﺗﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ) SC‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ (‬
‫ﺩﺭ ‪ SDH‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪SDH‬‬

‫↨‬
‫‪F :\ Fiber optic \ Routin test 2 \ PM \ PM3 \ ……… → Access‬‬
‫‪Battery & Sharger‬‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ‪ PDB ،‬ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﺑﯽ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫) ‪ ( dc‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی‬ ‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺑﯽ ﻭ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ‪ PDB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫) ‪PDB ( dc‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ) ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ‬
‫) ‪ ( ac‬ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫‪:‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ‪SDH‬‬
‫‪ 2M‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ SDH‬ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ‬ ‫‪ o‬ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭽﻴﻨﮓ ‪ :‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﺗﺎ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Protection‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺁﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﮐﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ‪ 2M‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﺗﺴﺖ ‪ : CLK‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Clk‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ SDH‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ‪ CLK‬ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ) ‪ ( Protection‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺁﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫‪ Clk Protection‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ‪ Clk‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ o‬ﺗﺴﺖ ‪ TSI‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺖ ‪ CLK‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫*ﭼﻮﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪ STM‬ﺗﺮﺍﻓﻴﮏ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪Data‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺴﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ TAOC‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ i-LCT‬ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪ o‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪ Backup‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬

‫‪:‬‬

‫‪USER : V2SUPER‬‬
‫‪PASSWORD : SPR-V2‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪Utilities‬‬ ‫‪Data Backup‬‬ ‫‪Upload‬‬ ‫‪File name‬‬

‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬

‫‪Ok‬‬ ‫‪Yes‬‬
‫‪ Backup‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﺸﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ Backup‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ SDH‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ Backup‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬ ‫‪C :\ i-LCT \ ilct 25‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ‪ Backup‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ‬
‫‪F : \ Routin test \ Routin test 2 (87….) \ Backup \ PM3‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ‪ Current Alarm‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﭼﮏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬

‫ﺁﻻﺭﻣﯽ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ SDH‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﻧﻴﺰ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Maintenance‬‬ ‫‪Sweeching Operation‬‬ ‫‪Unit name‬‬ ‫‪enter‬‬

‫ً ﺑﺮﺍی ﭼﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ TSI‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‬‫ﻓﺮﺿﺎ‬

‫ﺑﺒﻨﻴﻢ ﭘﺮﻭﺗﮑﺸﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭی ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ FSW‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ‬
‫‪ MSW‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺮﻭﺗﮑﺸﻦ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ً ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Lkop‬ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ‬‫ﺣﺘﻤﺎ‬
‫‪CLR‬‬ ‫ً‬
‫‪ SC‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﮑﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Lkop‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪ TSI‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫* ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Access‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی‬

‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫* ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭ ‪ PDB‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Battery & Sharger‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ Transfer‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭ ‪ Level Metr‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪Recieve‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ‪ 800‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭ ‪ Level‬ﺻﻔﺮ‪db‬‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ‪ Level Metr‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ‪ Level‬ﻳﺎ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎ ﺑﺎ ‪± 1‬‬
‫‪0 db‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ‪ -7 db‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪BAYLY‬‬
‫‪ BAYLY‬ﺍﺯ ‪ Hyper Terminal‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Local‬ﺩﺭ ‪BAYLY‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪ Connect Use‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺩﻡ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ COM‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ COM1‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ‪ LCT‬ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭی ‪ BAYLY‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪Shelf‬‬ ‫‪ E1‬ﻳﮏ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫)** ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪ ‪ Password ،‬ﺷﻠﻒ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫‪ Default‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫‪ Factory Reset‬ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ‪ Password‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ E1‬ﻳﮏ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ‬
‫(‬‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ Shelf‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ TA01‬ﺷﻠﻒ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ TA02 ، Taoc‬ﺷﻠﻒ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪Taoc‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪.......‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

‫* ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎی ‪ 4-wire‬ﺷﻠﻒ ‪ Bayly‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪ 4‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﻭ ‪C‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ D‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎی ‪D2, C2, B2, A2, D1, C1,‬‬
‫‪ B1, A1‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ‪ BAYLY‬ﻫﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ LCT‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ‬

‫ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮی ‪ Menu‬ﻭ ‪ Submenu‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﮑﯽ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ )ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﺗﺎﻳﭙﯽ ﮐﻤﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ( ﻭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺟﺰﺍی ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫‪Bayly-‬‬ ‫‪ Sisco‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﺎﻳﭙﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻫﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ Hyperterminal‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺤﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﮑﯽ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍی ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Enter‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Bayly-Hyperterminal‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫* ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ Bayly‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ) ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪ SDH‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪ i-LCT‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫‪ username‬ﻭ ‪ password‬ﭘﺴﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ( ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪USER : logon na01‬‬
‫‪PASSWORD : na01‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ( ﻭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ 1‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Select New Sitename :‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﺑﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ 3‬ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫‪Current Password : na01‬‬
‫‪Select New Password ? Y or N‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ ، N‬ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪Current Baud Rate : 9600‬‬

‫‪Select New Baud Rate ? Y or N‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ ، 4‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ Bayly‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ 5‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫‪Select Port Number / Port Name :‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ B‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬

‫* ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪ Level‬ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ Receive‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬

‫"‪ "3‬ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ‪ Adjust Receive‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ‪ Loop‬ﺑﺰﻧﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ 6‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ‪ Remote‬ﻟﻮپ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ R‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ‪ Local‬ﻟﻮپ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﻢ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ L‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ 6‬ﺍﺯ ‪ Shelf‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺪﺍﺣﺎﻓﻈﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﺑﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ ، 7‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Password‬ﻭ‪ .....‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ Default‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ) ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎی ﺭﻭی ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ( ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ 8‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﯽ ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ ﻳﺎ ‪ Error‬ﻭ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Submenu‬ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫* * ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ‬

‫‪ Ctrl+X‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺛﺒﺖ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ Enter‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪ 4 Shelf‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ) ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻠﻒ‬

‫‪4 ، ( E& M‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ( ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ‪ Bayly‬ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪4Wire‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ E1‬ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪ 10‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 12‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﺁﻟﮑﺎﺗﻞ (‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ Data‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺴﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ) ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﮐﺎﺭی ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ ( ﻭ ‪ Loop‬ﺑﺰﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺷﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Logon Modul‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ ( Logon Modul ) 5‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺎژﻭﻝ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ‪ Slot 1‬ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ 1‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪A,B,C,D‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ LSCDM‬ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ‪.‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Loopback‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ Local .‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Remote‬ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ‪ Loop‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Loop‬ﺁﻥ ‪ Off‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ‬
‫‪ Time Slote‬ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﺻﻼ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ TAOC‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺳﻌﺎﺩﺕ ﺁﺑﺎﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ‪5 Bayly‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪ E1‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﻳﮏ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪ Channel Bank‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻠﯽ ﻫﺎ ‪ Slot‬ﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ E1‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ‪ Bayly‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ E1‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬
‫…‪ LSDCM,DCM64,‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﺁﺧﺮی ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ Power‬ﺷﻠﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Madule Type‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺗﻬﺎ ‪ Madule‬ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻮپ ‪ Farrent‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ‪ LSDCM‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ‪ LSDCM‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪: BAYLY‬‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ Bayly‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻠﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ "‪ "2‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ‪ Set Port Name‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ Transmit‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ East‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ West‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ "‪ "5‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ‪ Log On Module‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫‪ Port‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ "‪ "1‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ‪System‬‬
‫‪ Option‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ) ﭘﺴﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﭘﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ‪ Ring‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ West‬ﻭ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﯽ ‪East‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﯽ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻳﮏ ‪ LSDCM‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ A,B,C‬ﻭﻳﺎ ‪ D‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ )ﭘﻮﺭﺕ(‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ‪ Enable‬ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪) ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 6‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ (‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ Enter desired Channel‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﺳﻼﺕ ‪ 64Kb/s‬ﺍﺯ ‪ 2M‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﺳﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪(.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ‪SubChannel‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪SubChannel‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻓﻬﻤﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ‪ (DATA Rate) Bode Rate‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﻓﺮﺿﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Bode Rate‬ﻣﺎ ‪9600‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ‪ SubChannel‬ﻳﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎ ﻫﺸﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭﻟﯽ‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ 9600‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 8K‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻼ ‪ SubChannel‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 8‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ Select Sub-Rate Channel‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪1‬ﻭ‪ 2‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﮐﻞ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ) ﻣﺜﻼ ‪2‬ﻳﺎ‪3‬ﻳﺎ‪...‬ﺗﺎ‪ ( 8‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 4‬ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ‪ Asyncron‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Syncron‬ﺭﺍ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮی ﮐﻼک ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪) Syncron‬ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ(( ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻼﮐﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺑﺎﺯی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫)‪) Asyncron‬ﻏﻴﺮﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻧﯽ(( ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﺮﺿﺎ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺎﻟﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺵ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ‪ 8‬ﺑﻴﺖ‪8 ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎ ‪ Parity bit‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ‪Parity‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺧﻄﺎﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮐﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻭﺝ )‪ (Odd‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺩ) ‪(Even‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻴﭽﮑﺪﺍﻡ )‪ (None‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ Parity‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺻﺤﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﭼﮏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺯﻭﺝ ﻳﺎ ‪ Odd‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺸﺖ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻫﺸﺖ ﺑﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻳﮏ ﻫﺎی ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺩ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺖ ‪ Parity‬ﻳﮏ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﯽ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Receive‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺖ ‪ Parity‬ﭼﮏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ‪ Parity‬ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ‪ None‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ Stop bit‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ‪ E1‬ﺩﺭ ‪: Bayly‬‬

‫‪ : Frame Loss‬ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﺧﻂ ‪ E1‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﺩﺭ ﺁﺷﮑﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ LED‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Multiframe Loss‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Remot Alarm‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺁﺷﮑﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯی ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ‪ Led‬ﺯﺭﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Channel Alarm‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺎﻳﻢ ﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : AIS‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Output Fail‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ‪ E1‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﺸﯽ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : High Error Rate‬ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺧﻄﺎی ﺁﺷﮑﺎﺭﺳﺎﺯی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺁﺳﺘﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Diagnostics‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪ Bayly‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺳﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ E1‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻓﻴﺒﺮﻧﻮﺭی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪E1 IM п : ( E1 Interface Module п‬‬ ‫) ‪E1CB : ( E1 Channel Bank Module‬‬
‫) ‪E1 BM : ( E1 Branching Module‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی‬

‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ E1‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪E1 CB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺠﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ‪ E1 IM п‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ‪ E1‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺍﺯ ‪E1 BM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺷﺶ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ ‪E & M‬‬

‫‪Signaling‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﺶ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ 2‬ﺯﻭﺝ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ RX , TX‬ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ E & M‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪E & M‬‬

‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺡ ‪ E & M‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ‪ Eear & Mouth‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪: E & M‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Bayly‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ E & M‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ Slot‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 3‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ A1 .‬ﻭ ‪ A2‬ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪ E1‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Slot‬ﻫﺎی ‪ E1‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ A3‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ‪ Slot‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ E & M‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ Bayly‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪E & M‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﻭﺯ ‪ 10‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻭ ‪ 10‬ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﻳﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ E & M‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ‪A3‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ‪ 12‬ﭘﻴﻦ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﻭ ‪ 5‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ 6 ،‬ﻭ ‪ 7‬ﻭ ‪8‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ 9 ،‬ﻭ ‪ 0‬ﻭ ‪ 1‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ 2 ،‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ‪ Bayly‬ﺩﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ E & M‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ Slot‬ﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ‪ Slot‬ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ A4 , A5‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ A1, A2 ) .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ E1‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ( ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ 2‬ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ 8‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﻫﯽ ﭘﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ ) ‪_ ( A1‬ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ 4‬ﻭ ‪ 5‬ﻭ ‪ 6‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ )‬
‫‪ _ ( B1‬ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ 7‬ﻭ ‪ 8‬ﻭ ‪ 9‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺳﻮﻡ ) ‪ _ ( C1‬ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ 0‬ﻭ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪2‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ) ‪ _( D1‬ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﻭ ‪ 5‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ ) ‪_ ( A2‬ﭘﻴﻦ ‪6‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ 7‬ﻭ ‪ 8‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺷﺸﻢ ) ‪ _ ( B2‬ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ 9‬ﻭ ‪ 0‬ﻭ ‪ 1‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﻔﺘﻢ ) ‪( C2‬‬
‫_ ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺸﺘﻢ ) ‪( D2‬‬

‫‪Bayly‬‬ ‫* ‪ Pin‬ﭘﻨﺠﻢ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺑﻪ‪ MDF‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ 25‬ﺯﻭﺝ ) ‪ 50‬ﺳﻴﻢ ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 24‬ﺯﻭﺝ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺭﺍﻧﮋﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫‪ E & M‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫* ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪A,B,C,D‬‬

‫‪ A2,B2,C2,D2‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﺎ ‪ A1,B1,C1,D1‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ‬

‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ TAOC‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ TAOC‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﻳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ ] B‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ‪ E & M‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ [ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ 6‬ﻭ ‪ 7‬ﻭ ‪8‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﻨﺎﻝ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ D‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﻦ ‪ 2‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ E & M‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩی ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺪ‬

‫ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﺎی ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺪ‬

‫‪E &M‬‬ ‫• ‪Type1‬‬
‫‪E &M‬‬ ‫• ‪Type2‬‬
‫‪E &M‬‬ ‫• ‪Type3‬‬
‫‪E &M‬‬ ‫• ‪Type4‬‬
‫‪E &M‬‬ ‫• ‪Type5‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ TX‬ﻭ ﻻﻣﭙﯽ‬ ‫‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﻫﯽ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪ RX‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮی ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪ ﻭ‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻤﺘﯽ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻤﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻥ ﺟﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﭘﯽ ﺑﺮﺩﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی‬
‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺒﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺷﺪ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺍﻟﯽ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫‪........‬‬

‫‪ E & M‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪ Type 5‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫‪ Type 5‬ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﮑﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻳﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﺜﻼ ‪ Type 2‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ‪ Type‬ﻫﺎی ‪E‬‬
‫‪ Bayly‬ﻭ ﻣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻠﮑﺴﺮ ‪A3440AM‬‬ ‫‪ & M‬ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی‬
‫‪ Loop‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﯽ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ﺗﺮی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ Type1‬ﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ E & M‬ﻫﻢ ‪ Type1‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺧﻂ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ‪) Signaling‬ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ( ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ RX‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺎﻟﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪ Tx‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﭘﻠﮑﺲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ ، TX‬ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ RX‬ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻭﺝ‬
‫‪ E & M‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺳﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)* ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ ﺷﻬﺮی ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﻢ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻫﻢ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ADSL‬ﻭ ﭘﻬﻨﺎی ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺭﻭی ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺯﻭﺝ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪(.‬‬

‫‪ E & M‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺴﺖ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ 810‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ‪ ، SDH‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺣﺪﻭﺩﺍ‬
‫‪ 3400‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ‬ ‫‪ 2500 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ 10‬ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻤﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ‪ 800‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭ ‪ Level : 0 db‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Level Metr‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ‪800‬‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻓﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﯽ ﺑﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ‪ -1 db‬ﺍﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ‪± 1‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﻢ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺴﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ژﻧﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﻭ ‪ Level Metr‬ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻓﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ 2‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ‪ Loop‬ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺳﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻀﻌﻴﻔﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫½‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬

‫ﺗﺴﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪: E & M Type 5‬‬

‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Transfer‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﻤﯽ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ( ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺮ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪ ) ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ Detect‬ﮐﺮﺩ ( ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -48‬ﻭﻟﺖ( ﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺳﺮ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ )ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﻘﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺗﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻳﮏ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬

‫ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ) ‪( -48 V‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻠﯽ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺮ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ‪ E & M‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ ، Lamp Test‬ﺗﺴﺖ ﮐﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Tx signaling‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬ ‫)ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ( ﺍﮔﺮ ﻻﻣﭗ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺰﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻻﻣﭗ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪FXS : Foreign Xchange Subscriber‬‬

‫‪FXO : Foreign Xchange Office‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

‫‪25 Hz‬‬ ‫ﺯﻭﺝ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻬﺮی ﻭﻟﺘﺎژی ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 90‬ﻭﻟﺖ ‪ Ac‬ﻭ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ) .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺭﺩ ( ﭼﻮﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ 48‬ﻭﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺭﻭی ﺧﻂ ‪ E1‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ) ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪( unit -‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ) ﺗﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﻭ ‪(....‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺧﻂ ‪ E1‬ﻣﯽ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻠﻒ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ E1‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﻂ ‪ E1‬ﺑﻪ ‪ SDH‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ ﺍﺻﻼ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ) ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ (‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ )‬
‫ﺳﻌﺎﺩﺕ ﺁﺑﺎﺩ ( ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ SDH‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ (‪ .‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﻫﺎی ‪ FXS‬ﺩﺭ ‪ Subscriber‬ﻣﺪﺍﺭﺍﺗﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫* ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺷﻬﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ FXS‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﻦ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺍﺵ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺯﻧﮓ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬ ‫* ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻴﻨﮓ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻬﺮی‬
‫ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻭ ‪......‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻠﮑﺴﯽ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬
‫ﺷﻬﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪ FX‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ ).‬ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ‪ ، Loop‬ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ‪ Bayly‬ﻭ‪(.........‬‬
‫* ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻥ ﺟﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ FXO‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ‪ FXS‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ 8‬ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﻫﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ Loop‬ﺷﺪ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﺎﻧﮑﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻪ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ Normaly Open‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﯽ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺁﻻﺭﻣﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺎ ‪ Pin‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﻟﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Normaly Open‬ﻭ ‪ Normaly Close‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ pin‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ﮐﻮﭼﮑﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ dc‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺁﻫﻨﺮﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ‬
‫‪ NO‬ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ NC‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺟﺬﺏ ﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻻﻣﭙﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮﻳﮏ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ‪ SDH‬ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ‬
‫‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ) ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ (‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻟﻪ ‪ ، NO‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ( NC‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ )‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺭﻟﻪ ‪ NC‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺪﺍﺭی ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ /1‬ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ‪SDH‬‬
‫‪ /2‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺸﺖ ‪Bayly‬‬
‫‪ /3‬ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ _ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺍی ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺁﻣﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻻﺭﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺜﻼ ﺍﮔﺮ‪ Ac‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﻳﺎ ‪ Dc‬ﮐﻢ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺟﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪SDH‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪی ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ‬

‫ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮی ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺑﻮﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺭﻟﻪ ‪ NO‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫______ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺍﮔﺮ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ‪ Bayly‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺠﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪ Root‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺜﻼ ﻳﮏ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ‬
‫‪ Remote‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ‪ TX‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﻢ ( ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ Bayly‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪Loop‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﺭ (‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ Data Sheet‬ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻧﺤﻮی‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺭﺳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ‪ NO‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ‪ . NC‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭی ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩی ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ HK‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ X9‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬ ‫‪ 8 ، 2500 C‬ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻧﮑﺘﻮﺭﺵ‬ ‫‪NEC‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﮑﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ Pin 1,2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ‪ HKA‬ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ‪ Pin 14,15‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫‪ HKA‬ﺩﻭﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪MDF‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﮐﺎﺑﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ‪ MDF‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺍﺯ‬

‫‪ SDH‬ﻳﺎ ﺷﺎﺭﺯﺭ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﮐﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ﺭﻭی ﺳﻮﺋﻴﭻ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ (....‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﺑﻮﺩ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺎﮐﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ‪.‬ﻣﺜﻼ ﮐﻠﻴﺪی ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺩﺭ ‪ SDH‬ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪ 2‬ﭘﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ) ﺑﺎﺯ ( ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻟﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﯽ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ) ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Loop‬ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ (‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﻤﯽ ‪ A lead‬ﻭ ‪ B lead‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ‪ Loop‬ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﻭﻟﯽ ﺭﻟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭﺯﺭ ‪ 2‬ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ :‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ SDH‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭی ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬

‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬

‫‪ SDH‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻧﮑﺘﻮﺭ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬

‫ﺷﻮﻳﻢ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪Maintenance‬‬ ‫‪HK & Station Alar‬‬ ‫‪HKA Parametr‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ‪ilct‬‬

‫‪ SD‬ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ 8‬ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺭﻭی ﭘﻴﮑﺮ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ‪:‬‬
‫‪ / 1‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪1‬‬
‫‪ / 2‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪Sharger‬‬
‫‪ Loop‬ﺷﺪ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫‪ / 3‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ Open‬ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Default‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ NO ،‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻼ ﺭﻭی ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ‪ ، 1‬ﺩﻭ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻳﮏ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ( Severity ) Grad / 4‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪……., Major , Critical :‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ Send‬ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ ) .‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ‪ MDF‬ﺭﺍﻧﮋﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ (‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ﺩﺭﺏ‬
‫‪ , SDH‬ﺷﺎﺭﺯﺭ ‪ (.... ,‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Top‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪: NMS‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬

‫‪Create.1‬‬
‫‪Modify.2‬‬
‫‪Delete .3‬‬ ‫‪Housekeeping‬‬ ‫‪Configuration‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪Root‬‬
‫‪Refrence .4‬‬
‫‪Housekeeping Control .5‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫‪Create‬‬ ‫‪Housekeeping‬‬ ‫‪Configuration‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪Root‬‬

‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬

‫‪Create‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪Yes‬‬ ‫‪Action‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ Open , Severity, Name‬ﻳﺎ‪ Close‬ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬

‫‪Ok‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫‪Create‬‬ ‫‪Housekeeping‬‬ ‫‪Configuration‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪Root‬‬

‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬

‫‪Modify‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎ‬

‫‪Action‬‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ‪:‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫‪Create‬‬ ‫‪Housekeeping‬‬ ‫‪Configuration‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪Root‬‬

‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬

‫‪Action‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻠﻘﻪ ﻫﺎ‬

‫* ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﮑﺘﻮﺭ ‪ X2‬ﻣﺎژﻭﻝ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻳﮏ ‪ 2M‬ﺭﺍ ‪ Lock‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ Unlock‬ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ‪ Provisioning‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ Parameter Modification‬ﺭﺍ ﺯﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 2M‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ Facilities‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ OK‬ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ Service-State‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ‪ Lock‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ Unlock‬ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪،‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ‪ Unlock‬ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ Unlock‬ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ‪: Verify mismatch‬‬

‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺁﻻﺭﻣﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻠﻒ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﭼﻴﺰی ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪NMS‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻐﺎﻳﺮﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ‪ Match‬ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی‬
‫ﺷﻠﻒ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ Agent‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ‪ Match‬ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﻊ ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪،‬‬
‫‪ Verify‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Root‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪Operation‬‬ ‫‪NE Package‬‬ ‫‪Verify‬‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫‪Verify‬‬
‫‪Yes‬‬

‫‪ Cross connect‬ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺁﻻﺭﻡ ﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ‪ Verify‬ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ) ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ( ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬

‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ NMS‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ )‬
‫‪ ( NEC‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ NE , Server‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺯﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬

‫ﮐﻪ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪ Download‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ) ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪ ( Operation‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ‪ Server‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫) ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ‪ Agent‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ‪ (SD‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﭼﺸﻤﮏ‬
‫ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ (‬

‫ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ‪: DWDM‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻓﻴﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﺟﺪﻳﺪی‬
‫‪Wave length Division ) WDM‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺎﻟﺘﯽ ﭘﻠﮑﺲ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺝ‬
‫‪ WDM‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩی ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺝ‬ ‫‪ (Multiplexing‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ‬
‫‪ WDM‬ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺝ ﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﻴﺒﺮﻧﻮﺭی ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬

 ‫ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺻﺪ ﻧﺎﻧﻮﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫‪WDM‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ‪ WDM‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Coarse WDM‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﻔﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ‪ Dense WDM‬ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ‪ WDM‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎی ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﮐﻢ‬
‫‪ 1/6 nm‬ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ITU‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺎی‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ‪ Grid ITU‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺎی ‪ DWDM‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﯽ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺩﻭﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎی ‪ DWDM‬ﮐﻬ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﺳﻭﻡ ﻁﺭﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺩ ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻧﺩ ﮐﻬ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻳﮏ ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻡ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ‪ WDM‬ﺑﻬ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺩﻫﻧﺩﻩ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻭﺝ )‪ WLA‬ﻳﺎ ‪( WAVELENGTH‬‬
‫‪ ADAPTER‬ﻧﻳﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻭﺝ ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﭘﺗﻳﮏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬ ﻳﮏ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻭﺝ ﺍﺳﺗﺎﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻧﻣﺎﻳﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎ ﺑﻬ ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ﻧﻭﺭی ﮐﻬ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻭﺝ ﺁﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺎﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ )ﻭ ﺍﮔﺭ ﺑﺭ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭘﻧﺟﺭﻩ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺩ( ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻭﺭی ﺳﻳﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻳﺩ )‪ (black & white‬ﻭ ﺑﻬ ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ﻧﻭﺭی ﮐﻬ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻭﺝ ﺍﺳﺗﺎﻧﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺳﻳﮕﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ‬
‫)‪ (colored‬ﻣﯽ ﮔﻭﻳﻧﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ‪ :‬ﺳﻌﻴﺪﺭﻣﻀﺎﻧﯽ‪ -‬ﻣﻴﻨﺎ ﺗﻘﻮی‬